Retrieve segment registers on Windows amd64
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 @kindex -Ur
977 @cindex constructors
978 @item -Ur
979 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
981 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
982 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986 @samp{-r} for the others.
987
988 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996 in a linker script.
997
998 @kindex -v
999 @kindex -V
1000 @kindex --version
1001 @cindex version
1002 @item -v
1003 @itemx --version
1004 @itemx -V
1005 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1006 lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008 @kindex -x
1009 @kindex --discard-all
1010 @cindex deleting local symbols
1011 @item -x
1012 @itemx --discard-all
1013 Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015 @kindex -X
1016 @kindex --discard-locals
1017 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1018 @item -X
1019 @itemx --discard-locals
1020 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1023
1024 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026 @cindex symbol tracing
1027 @item -y @var{symbol}
1028 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031 to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1037 @item -Y @var{path}
1038 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039 for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042 @item -z @var{keyword}
1043 The recognized keywords are:
1044 @table @samp
1045
1046 @item combreloc
1047 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048 lookup caching possible.
1049
1050 @item defs
1051 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1052 shared libraries are still allowed.
1053
1054 @item execstack
1055 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
1057 @item global
1058 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
1062 @item initfirst
1063 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068 objects.
1069
1070 @item interpose
1071 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072 but the primary executable.
1073
1074 @item lazy
1075 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078 Lazy binding is the default.
1079
1080 @item loadfltr
1081 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082 runtime.
1083
1084 @item muldefs
1085 Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087 @item nocombreloc
1088 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090 @item nocopyreloc
1091 Disables production of copy relocs.
1092
1093 @item nodefaultlib
1094 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1095 ignore any default library search paths.
1096
1097 @item nodelete
1098 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1099
1100 @item nodlopen
1101 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1102
1103 @item nodump
1104 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1105
1106 @item noexecstack
1107 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1108
1109 @item text
1110 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1111
1112 @item notext
1113 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1114
1115 @item textoff
1116 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1117
1118 @item norelro
1119 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1120
1121 @item now
1122 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1123 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1124 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1125 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1126 first called.
1127
1128 @item origin
1129 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1130
1131 @item relro
1132 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1133
1134 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1135 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1136
1137 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1138 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1139
1140 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1141 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1142 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1143 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1144
1145 @item bndplt
1146 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1147
1148 @end table
1149
1150 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1151
1152 @kindex -(
1153 @cindex groups of archives
1154 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1155 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1156 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1157 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1158
1159 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1160 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1161 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1162 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1163 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1164 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1165 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1166 resolved.
1167
1168 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1169 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1170 more archives.
1171
1172 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1173 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1174 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1175 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1176 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1177 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1178 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1179 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1180 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1181 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1182 restore the old behaviour.
1183
1184 @kindex --as-needed
1185 @kindex --no-as-needed
1186 @item --as-needed
1187 @itemx --no-as-needed
1188 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1189 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1190 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1191 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1192 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1193 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1194 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1195 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1196 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1197 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1198 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1199 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1200 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1201
1202 @kindex --add-needed
1203 @kindex --no-add-needed
1204 @item --add-needed
1205 @itemx --no-add-needed
1206 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1207 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1208 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1209 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1210
1211 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1212 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1213 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1214
1215 @kindex -Bdynamic
1216 @kindex -dy
1217 @kindex -call_shared
1218 @item -Bdynamic
1219 @itemx -dy
1220 @itemx -call_shared
1221 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1222 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1223 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1224 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1225 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1226 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1227
1228 @kindex -Bgroup
1229 @item -Bgroup
1230 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1231 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1232 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1233 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1234 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1235
1236 @kindex -Bstatic
1237 @kindex -dn
1238 @kindex -non_shared
1239 @kindex -static
1240 @item -Bstatic
1241 @itemx -dn
1242 @itemx -non_shared
1243 @itemx -static
1244 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1245 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1246 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1247 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1248 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1249 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1250 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1251 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1252 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1253 libraries.
1254
1255 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1256 @item -Bsymbolic
1257 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1258 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1259 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1260 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1261 platforms which support shared libraries.
1262
1263 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1264 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1265 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1266 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1267 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1268 libraries.
1269
1270 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1271 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1272 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1273 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1274 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1275 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1276 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1277 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1278 which support shared libraries.
1279
1280 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1281 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1282
1283 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1284 @item --dynamic-list-data
1285 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1286
1287 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1288 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1289 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1290 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1291
1292 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1293 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1294 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1295
1296 @kindex --check-sections
1297 @kindex --no-check-sections
1298 @item --check-sections
1299 @itemx --no-check-sections
1300 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1301 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1302 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1303 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1304 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1305 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1306 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1307 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1308 option.
1309
1310 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1311 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1312 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1313 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1314 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1315 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1316 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1317 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1318 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1319 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1320 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1321 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1322
1323 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1324 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1325 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1326 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1327 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1328 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1329 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1330 symbols.
1331
1332 @cindex cross reference table
1333 @kindex --cref
1334 @item --cref
1335 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1336 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1337 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1338
1339 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1340 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1341 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1342 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1343 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1344 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1345 symbol are listed.
1346
1347 @cindex common allocation
1348 @kindex --no-define-common
1349 @item --no-define-common
1350 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1351 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1352 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1353
1354 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1355 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1356 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1357 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1358 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1359 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1360 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1361 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1362 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1363 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1364
1365 @cindex symbols, from command line
1366 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1367 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1368 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1369 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1370 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1371 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1372 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1373 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1374 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1375 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1376 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1377 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1378
1379 @cindex demangling, from command line
1380 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1381 @kindex --no-demangle
1382 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1383 @itemx --no-demangle
1384 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1385 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1386 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1387 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1388 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1389 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1390 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1391 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1392 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1393
1394 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1395 @kindex -I@var{file}
1396 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1397 @item -I@var{file}
1398 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1399 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1400 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1401 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1402 doing.
1403
1404 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1405 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1406 @item --fatal-warnings
1407 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1408 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1409 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1410
1411 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1412 @item --force-exe-suffix
1413 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1414
1415 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1416 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1417 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1418 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1419 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1420 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1421
1422 @kindex --gc-sections
1423 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1424 @cindex garbage collection
1425 @item --gc-sections
1426 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1427 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1428 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1429 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1430 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1431
1432 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1433 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1434 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1435 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1436 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1437 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1438 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1439 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1440 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1441
1442 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1443 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1444 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1445 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1446
1447 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1448 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1449 @cindex garbage collection
1450 @item --print-gc-sections
1451 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1452 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1453 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1454 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1455 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1456 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1457 line.
1458
1459 @kindex --print-output-format
1460 @cindex output format
1461 @item --print-output-format
1462 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1463 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1464 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1465
1466 @cindex help
1467 @cindex usage
1468 @kindex --help
1469 @item --help
1470 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1471
1472 @kindex --target-help
1473 @item --target-help
1474 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1475
1476 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1477 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1478 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1479 @option{-M} option, above.
1480
1481 @cindex memory usage
1482 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1483 @item --no-keep-memory
1484 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1485 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1486 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1487 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1488 while linking a large executable.
1489
1490 @kindex --no-undefined
1491 @kindex -z defs
1492 @item --no-undefined
1493 @itemx -z defs
1494 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1495 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1496 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1497 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1498 libraries being linked in.
1499
1500 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1501 @kindex -z muldefs
1502 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1503 @itemx -z muldefs
1504 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1505 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1506 first definition will be used.
1507
1508 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1509 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1510 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1511 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1512 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1513 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1514 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1515 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1516 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1517
1518 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1519 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1520 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1521 a shared library.
1522
1523 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1524 libraries specified at link time are that:
1525
1526 @itemize @bullet
1527 @item
1528 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1529 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1530 resolvable at load time.
1531 @item
1532 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1533 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1534
1535 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1536 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1537 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1538 appropriate memset function.
1539 @end itemize
1540
1541 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1542 @item --no-undefined-version
1543 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1544 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1545 will be issued instead.
1546
1547 @kindex --default-symver
1548 @item --default-symver
1549 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1550 exported symbols.
1551
1552 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1553 @item --default-imported-symver
1554 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1555 imported symbols.
1556
1557 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1558 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1559 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1560 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1561 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1562 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1563 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1564 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1565 inappropriate.
1566
1567 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1568 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1569 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1570 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1571
1572 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1573 @item --no-whole-archive
1574 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1575 archive files.
1576
1577 @cindex output file after errors
1578 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1579 @item --noinhibit-exec
1580 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1581 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1582 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1583 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1584
1585 @kindex -nostdlib
1586 @item -nostdlib
1587 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1588 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1589 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1590
1591 @ifclear SingleFormat
1592 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1593 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1594 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1595 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1596 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1597 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1598 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1599 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1600 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1601 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1602 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1603 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1604 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1605 @end ifclear
1606
1607 @kindex -pie
1608 @kindex --pic-executable
1609 @item -pie
1610 @itemx --pic-executable
1611 @cindex position independent executables
1612 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1613 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1614 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1615 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1616 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1617 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1618
1619 @kindex -qmagic
1620 @item -qmagic
1621 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1622
1623 @kindex -Qy
1624 @item -Qy
1625 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1626
1627 @kindex --relax
1628 @cindex synthesizing linker
1629 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1630 @cindex --no-relax
1631 @item --relax
1632 @itemx --no-relax
1633 An option with machine dependent effects.
1634 @ifset GENERIC
1635 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1636 @end ifset
1637 @ifset H8300
1638 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1639 @end ifset
1640 @ifset I960
1641 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1642 @end ifset
1643 @ifset XTENSA
1644 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1645 @end ifset
1646 @ifset M68HC11
1647 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1648 @end ifset
1649 @ifset NIOSII
1650 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1651 @end ifset
1652 @ifset POWERPC
1653 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1654 @end ifset
1655
1656 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1657 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1658 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1659 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1660 instructions, and combining constant values.
1661
1662 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1663 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1664 @ifset GENERIC
1665 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1666 family of processors.
1667 @end ifset
1668
1669 @ifset GENERIC
1670 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1671 but ignored.
1672 @end ifset
1673
1674 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1675 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1676
1677 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1678 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1679 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1680 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1681 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1682 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1683 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1684 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1685 @ifset GENERIC
1686 (such as VxWorks)
1687 @end ifset
1688 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1689 run-time memory.
1690
1691 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1692 or symbols needed for relocations.
1693
1694 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1695 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1696
1697 @ifset GENERIC
1698 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1699 @cindex runtime library search path
1700 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1701 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1702 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1703 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1704 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1705 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1706 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1707 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1708 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1709 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1710
1711 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1712 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1713 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1714 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1715 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1716 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1717 file systems.
1718
1719 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1720 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1721 the @option{-rpath} option.
1722 @end ifset
1723
1724 @ifset GENERIC
1725 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1726 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1727 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1728 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1729 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1730 of the input files.
1731
1732 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1733 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1734 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1735 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1736 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1737 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1738 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1739 appearing multiple times.
1740
1741 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1742 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1743 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1744 runtime linker would do.
1745
1746 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1747 libraries:
1748 @enumerate
1749 @item
1750 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1751 @item
1752 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1753 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1754 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1755 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1756 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1757 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1758 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1759 @item
1760 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1761 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1762 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1763 @item
1764 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1765 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1766 @item
1767 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1768 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1769 @item
1770 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1771 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1772 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1773 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1774 @item
1775 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1776 @item
1777 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1778 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1779 @end enumerate
1780
1781 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1782 warning and continue with the link.
1783 @end ifset
1784
1785 @kindex -shared
1786 @kindex -Bshareable
1787 @item -shared
1788 @itemx -Bshareable
1789 @cindex shared libraries
1790 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1791 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1792 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1793 undefined symbols in the link.
1794
1795 @kindex --sort-common
1796 @item --sort-common
1797 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1798 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1799 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1800 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1801 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1802 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1803 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1804 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1805
1806 @kindex --sort-section=name
1807 @item --sort-section=name
1808 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1809 patterns in the linker script.
1810
1811 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1812 @item --sort-section=alignment
1813 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1814 patterns in the linker script.
1815
1816 @kindex --split-by-file
1817 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1818 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1819 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1820 size of 1 if not given.
1821
1822 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1823 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1824 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1825 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1826 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1827 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1828 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1829 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1830 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1831 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1832 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1833 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1834
1835 @kindex --stats
1836 @item --stats
1837 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1838 as execution time and memory usage.
1839
1840 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1841 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1842 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1843 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1844 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1845
1846 @kindex --traditional-format
1847 @cindex traditional format
1848 @item --traditional-format
1849 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1850 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1851 use the traditional format instead.
1852
1853 @cindex dbx
1854 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1855 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1856 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1857 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1858 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1859 combine duplicate entries.
1860
1861 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1862 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1863 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1864 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1865 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1866 line.
1867 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1868 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1869 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1870 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1871 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1872
1873 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1874 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1875 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1876 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1877 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1878 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1879 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1880 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1881 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1882
1883 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1884 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1885 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1886 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1887 byte of the text segment.
1888
1889 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1890 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1891 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1892 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1893 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1894 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1895
1896 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1897 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1898 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1899 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1900 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1901
1902 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1903 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1904 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1905 values for @samp{method}:
1906
1907 @table @samp
1908 @item ignore-all
1909 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1910
1911 @item report-all
1912 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1913
1914 @item ignore-in-object-files
1915 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1916 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1917
1918 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1919 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1920 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1921 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1922 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1923 command line.
1924 @end table
1925
1926 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1927 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1928
1929 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1930 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1931 can change this to a warning.
1932
1933 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1934 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1935 @item --dll-verbose
1936 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1937 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1938 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1939 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1940 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1941
1942 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1943 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1944 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1945 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1946 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1947 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1948 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1949 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1950 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1951 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1952 @xref{WIN32}.
1953
1954 @kindex --warn-common
1955 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1956 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1957 @item --warn-common
1958 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1959 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1960 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1961 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1962 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1963 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1964
1965 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1966
1967 @table @samp
1968 @item int i = 1;
1969 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1970 file.
1971
1972 @item extern int i;
1973 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1974 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1975 variable somewhere.
1976
1977 @item int i;
1978 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1979 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1980 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1981 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1982 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1983 a definition of the same variable.
1984 @end table
1985
1986 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1987 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1988 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1989 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1990 a common symbol.
1991
1992 @enumerate
1993 @item
1994 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1995 definition for the symbol.
1996 @smallexample
1997 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1998 overridden by definition
1999 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2000 @end smallexample
2001
2002 @item
2003 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2004 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2005 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2006 @smallexample
2007 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2008 overriding common
2009 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2010 @end smallexample
2011
2012 @item
2013 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2014 @smallexample
2015 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2016 of `@var{symbol}'
2017 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2018 @end smallexample
2019
2020 @item
2021 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2022 @smallexample
2023 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2024 overridden by larger common
2025 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2026 @end smallexample
2027
2028 @item
2029 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2030 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2031 encountered in a different order.
2032 @smallexample
2033 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2034 overriding smaller common
2035 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2036 @end smallexample
2037 @end enumerate
2038
2039 @kindex --warn-constructors
2040 @item --warn-constructors
2041 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2042 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2043 detect the use of global constructors.
2044
2045 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2046 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2047 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2048 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2049 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2050 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2051 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2052 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2053 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2054 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2055 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2056 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2057 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2058
2059 @kindex --warn-once
2060 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2061 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2062 @item --warn-once
2063 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2064 which refers to it.
2065
2066 @kindex --warn-section-align
2067 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2068 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2069 @item --warn-section-align
2070 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2071 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2072 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2073 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2074 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2075
2076 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2077 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2078 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2079
2080 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2081 @item --warn-alternate-em
2082 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2083
2084 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2085 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2086 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2087 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2088 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2089
2090 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2091 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2092 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2093 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2094
2095 @kindex --whole-archive
2096 @cindex including an entire archive
2097 @item --whole-archive
2098 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2099 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2100 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2101 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2102 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2103 library. This option may be used more than once.
2104
2105 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2106 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2107 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2108 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2109 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2110
2111 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2112 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2113 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2114 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2115 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2116 @var{symbol}.
2117
2118 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2119 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2120 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2121 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2122
2123 Here is a trivial example:
2124
2125 @smallexample
2126 void *
2127 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2128 @{
2129 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2130 return __real_malloc (c);
2131 @}
2132 @end smallexample
2133
2134 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2135 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2136 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2137 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2138
2139 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2140 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2141 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2142 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2143 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2144
2145 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2146 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2147 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2148 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2149
2150 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2151 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2152 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2153 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2154 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2155
2156 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2157 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2158 @item --enable-new-dtags
2159 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2160 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2161 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2162 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2163 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2164 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2165 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2166 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2167
2168 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2169 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2170 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2171 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2172 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2173 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2174 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2175
2176 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2177 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2178 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2179 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2180 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2181 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2182 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2183
2184 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2185 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2186 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2187 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2188 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2189 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2190
2191 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2192 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2193 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2194 has been used.
2195
2196 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2197 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2198
2199 @kindex --build-id
2200 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2201 @item --build-id
2202 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2203 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2204 or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2205 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2206 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2207 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2208 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2209 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2210 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2211 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2212 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2213
2214 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2215 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2216 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2217 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2218 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2219 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2220
2221 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2222 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2223 @end table
2224
2225 @c man end
2226
2227 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2228
2229 @c man begin OPTIONS
2230
2231 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2232 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2233 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2234 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2235 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2236 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2237 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2238 object file).
2239
2240 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2241 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2242 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2243 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2244
2245 @table @gcctabopt
2246
2247 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2248 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2249 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2250 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2251 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2252
2253 @kindex --base-file
2254 @item --base-file @var{file}
2255 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2256 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2257 @file{dlltool}.
2258 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2259
2260 @kindex --dll
2261 @item --dll
2262 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2263 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2264 file.
2265 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2266
2267 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2268 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2269 @item --enable-long-section-names
2270 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2271 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2272 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2273 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2274 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2275 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2276 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2277 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2278 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2279 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2280 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2281 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2282 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2283 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2284 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2285 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2286 image and not stripping symbols.
2287 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2288
2289 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2290 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2291 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2292 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2293 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2294 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2295 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2296 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2297 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2298 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2299 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2300 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2301 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2302 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2303 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2304 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2305 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2306 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2307
2308 @kindex --leading-underscore
2309 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2310 @item --leading-underscore
2311 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2312 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2313 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2314 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2315
2316 @cindex DLLs, creating
2317 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2318 @item --export-all-symbols
2319 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2320 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2321 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2322 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2323 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2324 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2325 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2326 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2327 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2328 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2329 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2330 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2331 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2332 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2333 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2334 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2335 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2336 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2337 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2338 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2339 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2340 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2341 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2342
2343 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2344 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2345 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2346 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2347 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2348
2349 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2350 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2351 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2352 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2353
2354 @kindex --file-alignment
2355 @item --file-alignment
2356 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2357 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2358 512.
2359 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2360
2361 @cindex heap size
2362 @kindex --heap
2363 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2364 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2365 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2366 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2367 committed.
2368 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2369
2370 @cindex image base
2371 @kindex --image-base
2372 @item --image-base @var{value}
2373 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2374 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2375 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2376 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2377 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2378 for dlls.
2379 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2380
2381 @kindex --kill-at
2382 @item --kill-at
2383 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2384 symbols before they are exported.
2385 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2386
2387 @kindex --large-address-aware
2388 @item --large-address-aware
2389 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2390 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2391 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2392 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2393 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2394 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2395
2396 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2397 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2398 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2399 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2400 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2401 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2402 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2403
2404 @kindex --major-image-version
2405 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2406 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2407 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2408
2409 @kindex --major-os-version
2410 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2411 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2412 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2413
2414 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2415 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2416 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2417 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2418
2419 @kindex --minor-image-version
2420 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2421 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2422 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2423
2424 @kindex --minor-os-version
2425 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2426 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2427 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2428
2429 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2430 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2431 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2432 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2433
2434 @cindex DEF files, creating
2435 @cindex DLLs, creating
2436 @kindex --output-def
2437 @item --output-def @var{file}
2438 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2439 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2440 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2441 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2442 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2443 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2444
2445 @cindex DLLs, creating
2446 @kindex --out-implib
2447 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2448 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2449 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2450 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2451 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2452 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2453 creation step.
2454 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2455
2456 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2457 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2458 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2459 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2460 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2461 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2462 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2463 execution are avoided.
2464 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2465
2466 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2467 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2468 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2469 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2470 default.
2471 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2472
2473 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2474 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2475 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2476 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2477 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2478 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2479 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2480 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2481 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2482 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2483
2484 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2485 @item --enable-auto-import
2486 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2487 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2488 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2489 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2490 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2491 specification published by Microsoft.
2492
2493 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2494 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2495 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2496 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2497 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2498
2499 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2500 see this message:
2501
2502 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2503 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2504
2505 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2506 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2507 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2508 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2509 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2510 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2511 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2512 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2513 the warning, and exit.
2514
2515 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2516 data type of the exported variable:
2517
2518 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2519 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2520 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2521
2522 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2523 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2524 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2525 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2526
2527 @example
2528 extern type extern_array[];
2529 extern_array[1] -->
2530 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2531 @end example
2532
2533 or
2534
2535 @example
2536 extern type extern_array[];
2537 extern_array[1] -->
2538 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2539 @end example
2540
2541 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2542 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2543
2544 @example
2545 extern struct s extern_struct;
2546 extern_struct.field -->
2547 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2548 @end example
2549
2550 or
2551
2552 @example
2553 extern long long extern_ll;
2554 extern_ll -->
2555 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2556 @end example
2557
2558 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2559 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2560 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2561 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2562 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2563 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2564 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2565 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2566
2567 Original:
2568 @example
2569 --foo.h
2570 extern int arr[];
2571 --foo.c
2572 #include "foo.h"
2573 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2574 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2575 @}
2576 @end example
2577
2578 Solution 1:
2579 @example
2580 --foo.h
2581 extern int arr[];
2582 --foo.c
2583 #include "foo.h"
2584 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2585 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2586 volatile int *parr = arr;
2587 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2588 @}
2589 @end example
2590
2591 Solution 2:
2592 @example
2593 --foo.h
2594 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2595 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2596 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2597 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2598 #else
2599 #define FOO_IMPORT
2600 #endif
2601 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2602 --foo.c
2603 #include "foo.h"
2604 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2605 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2606 @}
2607 @end example
2608
2609 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2610 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2611 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2612 functions).
2613 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2614
2615 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2616 @item --disable-auto-import
2617 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2618 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2619 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2620
2621 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2622 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2623 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2624 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2625 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2626 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2627 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2628
2629 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2630 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2631 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2632 DLLs.
2633 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2634
2635 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2636 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2637 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2638 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2639
2640 @kindex --section-alignment
2641 @item --section-alignment
2642 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2643 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2644 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2645
2646 @cindex stack size
2647 @kindex --stack
2648 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2649 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2650 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2651 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2652 committed.
2653 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2654
2655 @kindex --subsystem
2656 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2657 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2658 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2659 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2660 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2661 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2662 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2663 @var{which}.
2664 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2665
2666 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2667 of the PE file header:
2668 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2669
2670 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2671 @item --high-entropy-va
2672 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2673 (ASLR).
2674
2675 @kindex --dynamicbase
2676 @item --dynamicbase
2677 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2678 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2679 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2680
2681 @kindex --forceinteg
2682 @item --forceinteg
2683 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2684
2685 @kindex --nxcompat
2686 @item --nxcompat
2687 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2688 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2689
2690 @kindex --no-isolation
2691 @item --no-isolation
2692 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2693
2694 @kindex --no-seh
2695 @item --no-seh
2696 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2697 this image.
2698
2699 @kindex --no-bind
2700 @item --no-bind
2701 Do not bind this image.
2702
2703 @kindex --wdmdriver
2704 @item --wdmdriver
2705 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2706
2707 @kindex --tsaware
2708 @item --tsaware
2709 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2710
2711 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2712 @item --insert-timestamp
2713 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2714 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2715 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2716 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2717 will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2718 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2719 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2720 that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2721 identically.
2722 @end table
2723
2724 @c man end
2725
2726 @ifset C6X
2727 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2728
2729 @c man begin OPTIONS
2730
2731 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2732 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2733 all executables use an index of 0.
2734
2735 @table @gcctabopt
2736
2737 @kindex --dsbt-size
2738 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2739 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2740 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2741 entries.
2742
2743 @kindex --dsbt-index
2744 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2745 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2746 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2747 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2748 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2749
2750 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2751 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2752 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2753
2754 @end table
2755
2756 @c man end
2757 @end ifset
2758
2759 @ifset M68HC11
2760 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2761
2762 @c man begin OPTIONS
2763
2764 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2765 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2766
2767 @table @gcctabopt
2768
2769 @kindex --no-trampoline
2770 @item --no-trampoline
2771 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2772 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2773 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2774
2775 @kindex --bank-window
2776 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2777 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2778 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2779 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2780 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2781
2782 @end table
2783
2784 @c man end
2785 @end ifset
2786
2787 @ifset M68K
2788 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2789
2790 @c man begin OPTIONS
2791
2792 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2793 when linking for 68K targets.
2794
2795 @table @gcctabopt
2796
2797 @kindex --got
2798 @item --got=@var{type}
2799 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2800 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2801 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2802 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2803
2804 @end table
2805
2806 @c man end
2807 @end ifset
2808
2809 @ifset MIPS
2810 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2811
2812 @c man begin OPTIONS
2813
2814 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2815 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2816
2817 @table @gcctabopt
2818
2819 @kindex --insn32
2820 @item --insn32
2821 @kindex --no-insn32
2822 @itemx --no-insn32
2823 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2824 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2825 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2826 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2827 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2828 possible.
2829
2830 @end table
2831
2832 @c man end
2833 @end ifset
2834
2835 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2836 @node Environment
2837 @section Environment Variables
2838
2839 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2840
2841 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2842 @ifclear SingleFormat
2843 @code{GNUTARGET},
2844 @end ifclear
2845 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2846
2847 @ifclear SingleFormat
2848 @kindex GNUTARGET
2849 @cindex default input format
2850 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2851 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2852 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2853 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2854 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2855 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2856 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2857 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2858 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2859 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2860 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2861 @end ifclear
2862
2863 @kindex LDEMULATION
2864 @cindex default emulation
2865 @cindex emulation, default
2866 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2867 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2868 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2869 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2870 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2871 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2872 linker was configured.
2873
2874 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2875 @cindex demangling, default
2876 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2877 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2878 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2879 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2880 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2881 options.
2882
2883 @c man end
2884 @end ifset
2885
2886 @node Scripts
2887 @chapter Linker Scripts
2888
2889 @cindex scripts
2890 @cindex linker scripts
2891 @cindex command files
2892 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2893 written in the linker command language.
2894
2895 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2896 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2897 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2898 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2899 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2900 described below.
2901
2902 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2903 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2904 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2905 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2906 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2907
2908 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2909 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2910 default linker script.
2911
2912 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2913 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2914 Linker Scripts}.
2915
2916 @menu
2917 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2918 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2919 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2920 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2921 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2922 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2923 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2924 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2925 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2926 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2927 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2928 @end menu
2929
2930 @node Basic Script Concepts
2931 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2932 @cindex linker script concepts
2933 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2934 describe the linker script language.
2935
2936 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2937 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2938 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2939 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2940 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2941 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2942 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2943 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2944
2945 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2946 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2947 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
2948 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2949 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2950 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2951 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2952 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2953 of debugging information.
2954
2955 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2956 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2957 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2958 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2959 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2960 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2961 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2962 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2963 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2964 RAM address would be the VMA.
2965
2966 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2967 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2968
2969 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2970 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2971 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2972 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2973 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2974 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2975 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2976
2977 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2978 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2979 option.
2980
2981 @node Script Format
2982 @section Linker Script Format
2983 @cindex linker script format
2984 Linker scripts are text files.
2985
2986 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2987 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2988 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2989 generally ignored.
2990
2991 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2992 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2993 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2994 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2995 file name.
2996
2997 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2998 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2999 to whitespace.
3000
3001 @node Simple Example
3002 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3003 @cindex linker script example
3004 @cindex example of linker script
3005 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3006
3007 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3008 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3009 memory layout of the output file.
3010
3011 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3012 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3013 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3014 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3015 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3016 your input files.
3017
3018 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3019 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3020 linker script which will do that:
3021 @smallexample
3022 SECTIONS
3023 @{
3024 . = 0x10000;
3025 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3026 . = 0x8000000;
3027 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3028 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3029 @}
3030 @end smallexample
3031
3032 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3033 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3034 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3035
3036 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3037 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3038 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3039 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3040 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3041 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3042 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3043
3044 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3045 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3046 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3047 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3048 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3049 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3050
3051 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3052 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3053 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3054
3055 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3056 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3057 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3058 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3059 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3060 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3061 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3062
3063 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3064 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3065 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3066 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3067 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3068 sections.
3069
3070 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3071
3072 @node Simple Commands
3073 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3074 @cindex linker script simple commands
3075 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3076
3077 @menu
3078 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3079 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3080 @ifclear SingleFormat
3081 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3082 @end ifclear
3083
3084 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3085 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3086 @end menu
3087
3088 @node Entry Point
3089 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3090 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3091 @cindex start of execution
3092 @cindex first instruction
3093 @cindex entry point
3094 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3095 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3096 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3097 @smallexample
3098 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3099 @end smallexample
3100
3101 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3102 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3103 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3104 @itemize @bullet
3105 @item
3106 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3107 @item
3108 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3109 @item
3110 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3111 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3112 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3113 @item
3114 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3115 @item
3116 The address @code{0}.
3117 @end itemize
3118
3119 @node File Commands
3120 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3121 @cindex linker script file commands
3122 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3123
3124 @table @code
3125 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3126 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3127 @cindex including a linker script
3128 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3129 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3130 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3131 10 levels deep.
3132
3133 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3134 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3135
3136 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3137 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3138 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3139 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3140 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3141 @cindex linker script input object files
3142 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3143 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3144
3145 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3146 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3147 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3148
3149 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3150 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3151
3152 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3153 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3154 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3155 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3156 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3157 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3158 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3159 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3160 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3161
3162 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3163 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3164 @samp{-l}.
3165
3166 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3167 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3168 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3169
3170 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3171 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3172 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3173 @cindex grouping input files
3174 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3175 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3176 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3177 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3178
3179 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3180 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3181 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3182 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3183 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3184 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3185 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3186 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3187 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3188 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3189 setting afterwards.
3190
3191 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3192 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3193 @cindex output file name in linker script
3194 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3195 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3196 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3197 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3198 precedence.
3199
3200 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3201 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3202
3203 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3204 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3205 @cindex library search path in linker script
3206 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3207 @cindex search path in linker script
3208 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3209 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3210 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3211 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3212 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3213 the command line option are searched first.
3214
3215 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3216 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3217 @cindex first input file
3218 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3219 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3220 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3221 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3222 first file.
3223 @end table
3224
3225 @ifclear SingleFormat
3226 @node Format Commands
3227 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3228 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3229
3230 @table @code
3231 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3232 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3233 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3234 @cindex output file format in linker script
3235 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3236 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3237 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3238 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3239 line option takes precedence.
3240
3241 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3242 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3243 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3244 desired endianness.
3245
3246 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3247 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3248 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3249 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3250
3251 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3252 command:
3253 @smallexample
3254 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3255 @end smallexample
3256 This says that the default format for the output file is
3257 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3258 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3259 format.
3260
3261 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3262 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3263 @cindex input file format in linker script
3264 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3265 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3266 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3267 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3268 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3269 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3270 @end table
3271 @end ifclear
3272
3273 @node REGION_ALIAS
3274 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3275 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3276 @cindex region alias
3277 @cindex region names
3278
3279 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3280 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3281
3282 @smallexample
3283 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3284 @end smallexample
3285
3286 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3287 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3288 to memory regions. An example follows.
3289
3290 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3291 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3292 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3293 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3294 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3295 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3296 sections:
3297
3298 @itemize @bullet
3299 @item
3300 @code{.text} program code;
3301 @item
3302 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3303 @item
3304 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3305 @item
3306 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3307 @end itemize
3308
3309 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3310 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3311 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3312 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3313 @code{C}:
3314 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3315 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3316 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3317 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3318 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3319 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3320 @end multitable
3321 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3322 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3323 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3324 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3325
3326 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3327 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3328 memory layout:
3329 @smallexample
3330 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3331
3332 SECTIONS
3333 @{
3334 .text :
3335 @{
3336 *(.text)
3337 @} > REGION_TEXT
3338 .rodata :
3339 @{
3340 *(.rodata)
3341 rodata_end = .;
3342 @} > REGION_RODATA
3343 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3344 @{
3345 data_start = .;
3346 *(.data)
3347 @} > REGION_DATA
3348 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3349 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3350 .bss :
3351 @{
3352 *(.bss)
3353 @} > REGION_BSS
3354 @}
3355 @end smallexample
3356
3357 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3358 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3359 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3360 @table @code
3361 @item A
3362 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3363 @smallexample
3364 MEMORY
3365 @{
3366 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3367 @}
3368
3369 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3370 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3371 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3372 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3373 @end smallexample
3374 @item B
3375 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3376 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3377 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3378 @smallexample
3379 MEMORY
3380 @{
3381 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3382 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3383 @}
3384
3385 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3386 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3387 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3388 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3389 @end smallexample
3390 @item C
3391 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3392 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3393 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3394 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3395 @smallexample
3396 MEMORY
3397 @{
3398 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3399 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3400 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3401 @}
3402
3403 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3404 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3405 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3406 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3407 @end smallexample
3408 @end table
3409
3410 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3411 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3412 necessary:
3413 @smallexample
3414 #include <string.h>
3415
3416 extern char data_start [];
3417 extern char data_size [];
3418 extern char data_load_start [];
3419
3420 void copy_data(void)
3421 @{
3422 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3423 @{
3424 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3425 @}
3426 @}
3427 @end smallexample
3428
3429 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3430 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3431 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3432
3433 @table @code
3434 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3435 @kindex ASSERT
3436 @cindex assertion in linker script
3437 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3438 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3439
3440 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3441 @kindex EXTERN
3442 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3443 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3444 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3445 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3446 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3447 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3448
3449 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3450 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3451 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3452 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3453 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3454 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3455
3456 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3457 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3458 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3459 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3460 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3461 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3462
3463 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3464 @kindex INSERT
3465 @cindex insert user script into default script
3466 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3467 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3468 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3469 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3470 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3471 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3472 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3473 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3474 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3475 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3476 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3477 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3478 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3479
3480 @smallexample
3481 SECTIONS
3482 @{
3483 OVERLAY :
3484 @{
3485 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3486 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3487 @}
3488 @}
3489 INSERT AFTER .text;
3490 @end smallexample
3491
3492 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3493 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3494 @cindex cross references
3495 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3496 references among certain output sections.
3497
3498 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3499 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3500 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3501 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3502 a function defined in the other section.
3503
3504 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3505 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3506 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3507 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3508 names.
3509
3510 @ifclear SingleFormat
3511 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3512 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3513 @cindex machine architecture
3514 @cindex architecture
3515 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3516 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3517 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3518 the @samp{-f} option.
3519 @end ifclear
3520
3521 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3522 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3523 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3524 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3525 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3526 @xref{Expression Section}.
3527 @end table
3528
3529 @node Assignments
3530 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3531 @cindex assignment in scripts
3532 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3533 @cindex variables, defining
3534 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3535 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3536
3537 @menu
3538 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3539 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3540 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3541 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3542 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3543 @end menu
3544
3545 @node Simple Assignments
3546 @subsection Simple Assignments
3547
3548 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3549
3550 @table @code
3551 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3552 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3553 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3554 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3555 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3556 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3557 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3558 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3559 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3560 @end table
3561
3562 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3563 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3564 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3565
3566 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3567 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3568
3569 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3570
3571 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3572
3573 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3574 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3575 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3576
3577 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3578 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3579
3580 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3581 assignments may be used:
3582
3583 @smallexample
3584 floating_point = 0;
3585 SECTIONS
3586 @{
3587 .text :
3588 @{
3589 *(.text)
3590 _etext = .;
3591 @}
3592 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3593 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3594 @}
3595 @end smallexample
3596 @noindent
3597 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3598 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3599 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3600 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3601 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3602
3603 @node HIDDEN
3604 @subsection HIDDEN
3605 @cindex HIDDEN
3606 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3607 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3608
3609 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3610 @code{HIDDEN}:
3611
3612 @smallexample
3613 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3614 SECTIONS
3615 @{
3616 .text :
3617 @{
3618 *(.text)
3619 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3620 @}
3621 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3622 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3623 @}
3624 @end smallexample
3625 @noindent
3626 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3627
3628 @node PROVIDE
3629 @subsection PROVIDE
3630 @cindex PROVIDE
3631 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3632 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3633 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3634 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3635 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3636 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3637 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3638 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3639
3640 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3641 @smallexample
3642 SECTIONS
3643 @{
3644 .text :
3645 @{
3646 *(.text)
3647 _etext = .;
3648 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3649 @}
3650 @}
3651 @end smallexample
3652
3653 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3654 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3655 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3656 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3657 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3658 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3659
3660 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3661 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3662 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3663 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3664 hidden and won't be exported.
3665
3666 @node Source Code Reference
3667 @subsection Source Code Reference
3668
3669 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3670 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3671 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3672 symbol that does not have a value.
3673
3674 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3675 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3676 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3677 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3678 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3679 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3680 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3681 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3682
3683 @smallexample
3684 extern int foo;
3685 @end smallexample
3686
3687 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3688
3689 @smallexample
3690 _foo = 1000;
3691 @end smallexample
3692
3693 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3694 transformation has taken place.
3695
3696 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3697 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3698 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3699 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3700 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3701 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3702 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3703
3704 @smallexample
3705 int foo = 1000;
3706 @end smallexample
3707
3708 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3709 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3710 number 1000 is initially stored.
3711
3712 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3713 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3714 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3715 So:
3716
3717 @smallexample
3718 foo = 1;
3719 @end smallexample
3720
3721 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3722 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3723 address. Whereas:
3724
3725 @smallexample
3726 int * a = & foo;
3727 @end smallexample
3728
3729 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3730 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3731 the variable @samp{a}.
3732
3733 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3734 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3735 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3736
3737 @smallexample
3738 foo = 1000;
3739 @end smallexample
3740
3741 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3742 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3743 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3744 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3745 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3746
3747 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3748 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3749 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3750 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3751 linker script contains these declarations:
3752
3753 @smallexample
3754 @group
3755 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3756 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3757 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3758 @end group
3759 @end smallexample
3760
3761 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3762
3763 @smallexample
3764 @group
3765 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3766
3767 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3768 @end group
3769 @end smallexample
3770
3771 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3772
3773 @node SECTIONS
3774 @section SECTIONS Command
3775 @kindex SECTIONS
3776 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3777 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3778
3779 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3780 @smallexample
3781 SECTIONS
3782 @{
3783 @var{sections-command}
3784 @var{sections-command}
3785 @dots{}
3786 @}
3787 @end smallexample
3788
3789 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3790
3791 @itemize @bullet
3792 @item
3793 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3794 @item
3795 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3796 @item
3797 an output section description
3798 @item
3799 an overlay description
3800 @end itemize
3801
3802 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3803 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3804 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3805 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3806 the layout of the output file.
3807
3808 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3809 below.
3810
3811 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3812 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3813 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3814 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3815 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3816 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3817
3818 @menu
3819 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3820 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3821 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3822 * Input Section:: Input section description
3823 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3824 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3825 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3826 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3827 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3828 @end menu
3829
3830 @node Output Section Description
3831 @subsection Output Section Description
3832 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3833 @smallexample
3834 @group
3835 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3836 [AT(@var{lma})]
3837 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3838 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3839 [@var{constraint}]
3840 @{
3841 @var{output-section-command}
3842 @var{output-section-command}
3843 @dots{}
3844 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3845 @end group
3846 @end smallexample
3847
3848 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3849
3850 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3851 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3852 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3853 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3854 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3855
3856 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3857
3858 @itemize @bullet
3859 @item
3860 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3861 @item
3862 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3863 @item
3864 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3865 @item
3866 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3867 @end itemize
3868
3869 @node Output Section Name
3870 @subsection Output Section Name
3871 @cindex name, section
3872 @cindex section name
3873 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3874 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3875 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3876 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3877 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3878 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3879 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3880 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3881 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3882 commas must be quoted.
3883
3884 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3885 Discarding}.
3886
3887 @node Output Section Address
3888 @subsection Output Section Address
3889 @cindex address, section
3890 @cindex section address
3891 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3892 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3893 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3894
3895 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3896 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3897 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3898 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3899 contained within the output section.
3900
3901 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3902
3903 @itemize @bullet
3904 @item
3905 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3906 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3907 in that region.
3908
3909 @item
3910 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3911 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3912 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3913 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3914
3915 @item
3916 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3917 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3918 counter.
3919 @end itemize
3920
3921 @noindent
3922 For example:
3923
3924 @smallexample
3925 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3926 @end smallexample
3927
3928 @noindent
3929 and
3930
3931 @smallexample
3932 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3933 @end smallexample
3934
3935 @noindent
3936 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3937 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3938 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3939 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3940 input sections.
3941
3942 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3943 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3944 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3945 do something like this:
3946 @smallexample
3947 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3948 @end smallexample
3949 @noindent
3950 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3951 aligned upward to the specified value.
3952
3953 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3954 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3955 sections are ignored).
3956
3957 @node Input Section
3958 @subsection Input Section Description
3959 @cindex input sections
3960 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3961 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3962
3963 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3964 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3965 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3966 map the input files into your memory layout.
3967
3968 @menu
3969 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3970 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3971 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3972 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3973 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3974 @end menu
3975
3976 @node Input Section Basics
3977 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3978 @cindex input section basics
3979 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3980 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3981
3982 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3983 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3984
3985 The most common input section description is to include all input
3986 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3987 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3988 @smallexample
3989 *(.text)
3990 @end smallexample
3991 @noindent
3992 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3993 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3994 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3995 example:
3996 @smallexample
3997 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3998 @end smallexample
3999 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4000 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4001
4002 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4003 @smallexample
4004 *(.text .rdata)
4005 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4006 @end smallexample
4007 @noindent
4008 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4009 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4010 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4011 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4012 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4013 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4014
4015 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4016 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4017 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4018 @smallexample
4019 data.o(.data)
4020 @end smallexample
4021
4022 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4023 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4024
4025 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4026
4027 @smallexample
4028 @group
4029 SECTIONS @{
4030 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4031 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4032 @}
4033 @end group
4034 @end smallexample
4035
4036 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4037 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4038 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4039 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4040 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4041
4042 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4043 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4044 with no whitespace around the colon.
4045
4046 @table @samp
4047 @item archive:file
4048 matches file within archive
4049 @item archive:
4050 matches the whole archive
4051 @item :file
4052 matches file but not one in an archive
4053 @end table
4054
4055 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4056 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4057 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4058 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4059 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4060 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4061 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4062 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4063 command.
4064
4065 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4066 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4067 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4068 @smallexample
4069 data.o
4070 @end smallexample
4071
4072 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4073 and does not contain any wild card
4074 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4075 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4076 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4077 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4078 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4079 the archive search path.
4080
4081 @node Input Section Wildcards
4082 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4083 @cindex input section wildcards
4084 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4085 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4086 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4087 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4088 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4089
4090 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4091 pattern for the file name.
4092
4093 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4094
4095 @table @samp
4096 @item *
4097 matches any number of characters
4098 @item ?
4099 matches any single character
4100 @item [@var{chars}]
4101 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4102 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4103 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4104 @item \
4105 quotes the following character
4106 @end table
4107
4108 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4109 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4110 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4111 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4112 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4113 a @samp{/} character.
4114
4115 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4116 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4117 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4118
4119 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4120 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4121 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4122 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4123 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4124 @smallexample
4125 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4126 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4127 @end smallexample
4128
4129 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4130 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4131 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4132 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4133 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4134 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4135 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4136
4137 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4138 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4139 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4140 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4141 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4142 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4143
4144 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4145 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4146 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4147 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4148 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4149
4150 @cindex SORT
4151 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4152
4153 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4154 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4155
4156 @enumerate
4157 @item
4158 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4159 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4160 sections have the same name.
4161 @item
4162 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4163 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4164 sections have the same alignment.
4165 @item
4166 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4167 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4168 @item
4169 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4170 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4171 @item
4172 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4173 @end enumerate
4174
4175 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4176 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4177 takes precedence over the command line option.
4178
4179 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4180 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4181 treated as nested sorting command.
4182
4183 @enumerate
4184 @item
4185 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4186 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4187 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4188 @item
4189 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4190 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4191 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4192 @end enumerate
4193
4194 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4195 command line option will be ignored.
4196
4197 @cindex SORT_NONE
4198 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4199 section sorting option.
4200
4201 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4202 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4203 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4204
4205 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4206 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4207 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4208 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4209 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4210 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4211 @smallexample
4212 @group
4213 SECTIONS @{
4214 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4215 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4216 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4217 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4218 @}
4219 @end group
4220 @end smallexample
4221
4222 @node Input Section Common
4223 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4224 @cindex common symbol placement
4225 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4226 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4227 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4228 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4229 named @samp{COMMON}.
4230
4231 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4232 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4233 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4234 input files are placed in another section.
4235
4236 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4237 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4238 @smallexample
4239 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4240 @end smallexample
4241
4242 @cindex scommon section
4243 @cindex small common symbols
4244 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4245 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4246 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4247 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4248 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4249 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4250 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4251 locations.
4252
4253 @cindex [COMMON]
4254 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4255 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4256 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4257
4258 @node Input Section Keep
4259 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4260 @cindex KEEP
4261 @cindex garbage collection
4262 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4263 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4264 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4265 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4266 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4267
4268 @node Input Section Example
4269 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4270 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4271 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4272 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4273 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4274 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4275 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4276 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4277 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4278 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4279
4280 @smallexample
4281 @group
4282 SECTIONS @{
4283 outputa 0x10000 :
4284 @{
4285 all.o
4286 foo.o (.input1)
4287 @}
4288 @end group
4289 @group
4290 outputb :
4291 @{
4292 foo.o (.input2)
4293 foo1.o (.input1)
4294 @}
4295 @end group
4296 @group
4297 outputc :
4298 @{
4299 *(.input1)
4300 *(.input2)
4301 @}
4302 @}
4303 @end group
4304 @end smallexample
4305
4306 @node Output Section Data
4307 @subsection Output Section Data
4308 @cindex data
4309 @cindex section data
4310 @cindex output section data
4311 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4312 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4313 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4314 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4315 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4316 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4317 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4318 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4319 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4320 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4321 counter.
4322
4323 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4324 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4325 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4326 stored.
4327
4328 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4329 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4330 @smallexample
4331 BYTE(1)
4332 LONG(addr)
4333 @end smallexample
4334
4335 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4336 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4337 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4338 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4339 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4340
4341 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4342 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4343 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4344 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4345 endianness of the first input object file.
4346
4347 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4348 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4349 @smallexample
4350 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4351 @end smallexample
4352 whereas this will work:
4353 @smallexample
4354 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4355 @end smallexample
4356
4357 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4358 @cindex holes, filling
4359 @cindex unspecified memory
4360 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4361 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4362 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4363 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4364 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4365 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4366 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4367 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4368 different parts of an output section.
4369
4370 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4371 value @samp{0x90}:
4372 @smallexample
4373 FILL(0x90909090)
4374 @end smallexample
4375
4376 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4377 section attribute, but it only affects the
4378 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4379 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4380 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4381 expression.
4382
4383 @node Output Section Keywords
4384 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4385 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4386 commands.
4387
4388 @table @code
4389 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4390 @cindex input filename symbols
4391 @cindex filename symbols
4392 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4393 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4394 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4395 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4396 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4397
4398 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4399 normally used for any other object file format.
4400
4401 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4402 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4403 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4404 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4405 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4406 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4407 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4408 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4409 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4410 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4411 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4412 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4413 ignored for other object file formats.
4414
4415 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4416 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4417 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4418 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4419 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4420 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4421 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4422 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4423 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4424 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4425 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4426 @code{exit}.
4427
4428 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4429 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4430 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4431 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4432 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4433 runtime code expects to see.
4434
4435 @smallexample
4436 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4437 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4438 *(.ctors)
4439 LONG(0)
4440 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4441 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4442 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4443 *(.dtors)
4444 LONG(0)
4445 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4446 @end smallexample
4447
4448 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4449 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4450 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4451 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4452 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4453 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4454 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4455 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4456
4457 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4458 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4459 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4460 scripts.
4461
4462 @end table
4463
4464 @node Output Section Discarding
4465 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4466 @cindex discarding sections
4467 @cindex sections, discarding
4468 @cindex removing sections
4469 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4470 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4471 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4472 @smallexample
4473 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4474 @end smallexample
4475 @noindent
4476 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4477 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4478 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4479 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4480 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4481 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4482 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4483 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4484 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4485
4486 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4487 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4488 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4489 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4490 section is discarded.
4491
4492 @cindex /DISCARD/
4493 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4494 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4495 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4496
4497 @node Output Section Attributes
4498 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4499 @cindex output section attributes
4500 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4501 like this:
4502
4503 @smallexample
4504 @group
4505 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4506 [AT(@var{lma})]
4507 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4508 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4509 [@var{constraint}]
4510 @{
4511 @var{output-section-command}
4512 @var{output-section-command}
4513 @dots{}
4514 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4515 @end group
4516 @end smallexample
4517
4518 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4519 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4520 remaining section attributes.
4521
4522 @menu
4523 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4524 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4525 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4526 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4527 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4528 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4529 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4530 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4531 @end menu
4532
4533 @node Output Section Type
4534 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4535 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4536 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4537
4538 @table @code
4539 @item NOLOAD
4540 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4541 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4542 @item DSECT
4543 @itemx COPY
4544 @itemx INFO
4545 @itemx OVERLAY
4546 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4547 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4548 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4549 section when the program is run.
4550 @end table
4551
4552 @kindex NOLOAD
4553 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4554 @cindex loading, preventing
4555 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4556 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4557 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4558 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4559 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4560 @smallexample
4561 @group
4562 SECTIONS @{
4563 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4564 @dots{}
4565 @}
4566 @end group
4567 @end smallexample
4568
4569 @node Output Section LMA
4570 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4571 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4572 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4573 @cindex load address
4574 @cindex section load address
4575 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4576 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4577 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4578 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4579 address is optional.
4580
4581 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4582 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4583 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4584 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4585 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4586
4587 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4588 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4589 load address:
4590
4591 @itemize @bullet
4592 @item
4593 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4594 the LMA address as well.
4595
4596 @item
4597 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4598
4599 @item
4600 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4601 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4602 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4603 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4604 the last section in the located region.
4605
4606 @item
4607 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4608 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4609
4610 @item
4611 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4612 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4613 @end itemize
4614
4615 @cindex ROM initialized data
4616 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4617 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4618 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4619 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4620 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4621 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4622 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4623 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4624 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4625
4626 @smallexample
4627 @group
4628 SECTIONS
4629 @{
4630 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4631 .mdata 0x2000 :
4632 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4633 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4634 .bss 0x3000 :
4635 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4636 @}
4637 @end group
4638 @end smallexample
4639
4640 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4641 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4642 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4643 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4644 script.
4645
4646 @smallexample
4647 @group
4648 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4649 char *src = &_etext;
4650 char *dst = &_data;
4651
4652 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4653 while (dst < &_edata)
4654 *dst++ = *src++;
4655
4656 /* Zero bss. */
4657 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4658 *dst = 0;
4659 @end group
4660 @end smallexample
4661
4662 @node Forced Output Alignment
4663 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4664 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4665 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4666 @cindex output section alignment
4667 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4668 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4669 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4670
4671 @node Forced Input Alignment
4672 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4673 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4674 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4675 @cindex input section alignment
4676 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4677 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4678 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4679
4680 @node Output Section Constraint
4681 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4682 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4683 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4684 @cindex constraints on output sections
4685 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4686 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4687 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4688 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4689
4690 @node Output Section Region
4691 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4692 @kindex >@var{region}
4693 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4694 @cindex memory regions and sections
4695 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4696 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4697
4698 Here is a simple example:
4699 @smallexample
4700 @group
4701 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4702 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4703 @end group
4704 @end smallexample
4705
4706 @node Output Section Phdr
4707 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4708 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4709 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4710 @cindex program headers and sections
4711 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4712 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4713 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4714 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4715 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4716 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4717
4718 Here is a simple example:
4719 @smallexample
4720 @group
4721 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4722 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4723 @end group
4724 @end smallexample
4725
4726 @node Output Section Fill
4727 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4728 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4729 @cindex section fill pattern
4730 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4731 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4732 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4733 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4734 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4735 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4736 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4737 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4738 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4739 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4740 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4741 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4742 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4743
4744 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4745 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4746
4747 Here is a simple example:
4748 @smallexample
4749 @group
4750 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4751 @end group
4752 @end smallexample
4753
4754 @node Overlay Description
4755 @subsection Overlay Description
4756 @kindex OVERLAY
4757 @cindex overlays
4758 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4759 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4760 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4761 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4762 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4763 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4764 than another.
4765
4766 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4767 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4768 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4769 command is as follows:
4770 @smallexample
4771 @group
4772 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4773 @{
4774 @var{secname1}
4775 @{
4776 @var{output-section-command}
4777 @var{output-section-command}
4778 @dots{}
4779 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4780 @var{secname2}
4781 @{
4782 @var{output-section-command}
4783 @var{output-section-command}
4784 @dots{}
4785 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4786 @dots{}
4787 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4788 @end group
4789 @end smallexample
4790
4791 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4792 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4793 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4794 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4795 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4796 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4797
4798 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4799 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4800
4801 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4802 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4803 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4804 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4805 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4806 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4807
4808 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4809 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4810 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4811 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4812 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4813
4814 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4815 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4816 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4817 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4818 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4819 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4820 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4821
4822 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4823 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4824
4825 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4826 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4827 @smallexample
4828 @group
4829 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4830 @{
4831 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4832 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4833 @}
4834 @end group
4835 @end smallexample
4836 @noindent
4837 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4838 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4839 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4840 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4841 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4842 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4843
4844 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4845 like the following.
4846
4847 @smallexample
4848 @group
4849 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4850 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4851 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4852 @end group
4853 @end smallexample
4854
4855 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4856 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4857 example could have been written identically as follows.
4858
4859 @smallexample
4860 @group
4861 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4862 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4863 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4864 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4865 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4866 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4867 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4868 @end group
4869 @end smallexample
4870
4871 @node MEMORY
4872 @section MEMORY Command
4873 @kindex MEMORY
4874 @cindex memory regions
4875 @cindex regions of memory
4876 @cindex allocating memory
4877 @cindex discontinuous memory
4878 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4879 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4880
4881 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4882 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4883 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4884 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4885 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4886 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4887 around to fit into the available regions.
4888
4889 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4890 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4891 you wish. The syntax is:
4892 @smallexample
4893 @group
4894 MEMORY
4895 @{
4896 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4897 @dots{}
4898 @}
4899 @end group
4900 @end smallexample
4901
4902 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4903 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4904 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4905 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4906 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4907 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4908 command.
4909
4910 @cindex memory region attributes
4911 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4912 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4913 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4914 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4915 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4916 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4917 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4918
4919 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4920 @table @samp
4921 @item R
4922 Read-only section
4923 @item W
4924 Read/write section
4925 @item X
4926 Executable section
4927 @item A
4928 Allocatable section
4929 @item I
4930 Initialized section
4931 @item L
4932 Same as @samp{I}
4933 @item !
4934 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4935 @end table
4936
4937 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4938 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4939 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4940 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4941 attributes.
4942
4943 @kindex ORIGIN =
4944 @kindex o =
4945 @kindex org =
4946 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4947 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4948 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4949 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4950 @code{ORG}).
4951
4952 @kindex LENGTH =
4953 @kindex len =
4954 @kindex l =
4955 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4956 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4957 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4958 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4959
4960 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4961 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4962 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4963 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4964 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4965 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4966 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4967 region.
4968
4969 @smallexample
4970 @group
4971 MEMORY
4972 @{
4973 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4974 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4975 @}
4976 @end group
4977 @end smallexample
4978
4979 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4980 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4981 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4982 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4983 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4984 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4985 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4986 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4987 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4988
4989 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4990 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4991 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4992
4993 @smallexample
4994 @group
4995 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4996 @end group
4997 @end smallexample
4998
4999 @node PHDRS
5000 @section PHDRS Command
5001 @kindex PHDRS
5002 @cindex program headers
5003 @cindex ELF program headers
5004 @cindex program segments
5005 @cindex segments, ELF
5006 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5007 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5008 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5009 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5010
5011 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5012 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5013 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5014 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5015 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5016
5017 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5018 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5019 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5020 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5021 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5022
5023 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5024 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5025 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5026
5027 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5028 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5029
5030 @smallexample
5031 @group
5032 PHDRS
5033 @{
5034 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5035 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5036 @}
5037 @end group
5038 @end smallexample
5039
5040 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5041 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5042 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5043 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5044 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5045 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5046
5047 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5048 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5049 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5050 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5051 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5052 Section Phdr}.
5053
5054 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5055 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5056 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5057 contain the section.
5058
5059 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5060 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5061 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5062 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5063 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5064 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5065 segment at all.
5066
5067 @kindex FILEHDR
5068 @kindex PHDRS
5069 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5070 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5071 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5072 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5073 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5074 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5075 these keywords.
5076
5077 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5078 value of the keyword.
5079
5080 @table @asis
5081 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5082 Indicates an unused program header.
5083
5084 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5085 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5086 the file.
5087
5088 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5089 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5090
5091 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5092 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5093 found.
5094
5095 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5096 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5097
5098 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5099 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5100 ABI.
5101
5102 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5103 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5104
5105 @item @var{expression}
5106 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5107 be used for types not defined above.
5108 @end table
5109
5110 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5111 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5112 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5113 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5114 output section attribute.
5115
5116 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5117 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5118 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5119 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5120 header.
5121
5122 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5123 headers used on a native ELF system.
5124
5125 @example
5126 @group
5127 PHDRS
5128 @{
5129 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5130 interp PT_INTERP ;
5131 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5132 data PT_LOAD ;
5133 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5134 @}
5135
5136 SECTIONS
5137 @{
5138 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5139 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5140 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5141 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5142 @dots{}
5143 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5144 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5145 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5146 @dots{}
5147 @}
5148 @end group
5149 @end example
5150
5151 @node VERSION
5152 @section VERSION Command
5153 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5154 @cindex symbol versions
5155 @cindex version script
5156 @cindex versions of symbols
5157 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5158 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5159 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5160 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5161 shared library.
5162
5163 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5164 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5165 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5166
5167 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5168 @smallexample
5169 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5170 @end smallexample
5171
5172 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5173 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5174 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5175 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5176 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5177 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5178 library.
5179
5180 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5181 examples.
5182
5183 @smallexample
5184 VERS_1.1 @{
5185 global:
5186 foo1;
5187 local:
5188 old*;
5189 original*;
5190 new*;
5191 @};
5192
5193 VERS_1.2 @{
5194 foo2;
5195 @} VERS_1.1;
5196
5197 VERS_2.0 @{
5198 bar1; bar2;
5199 extern "C++" @{
5200 ns::*;
5201 "f(int, double)";
5202 @};
5203 @} VERS_1.2;
5204 @end smallexample
5205
5206 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5207 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5208 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5209 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5210 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5211 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5212 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5213 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5214 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5215 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5216
5217 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5218 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5219 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5220
5221 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5222 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5223 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5224
5225 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5226 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5227 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5228 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5229 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5230 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5231 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5232 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5233 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5234
5235 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5236 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5237 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5238 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5239
5240 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5241 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5242 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5243 won't.
5244
5245 @smallexample
5246 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5247 @end smallexample
5248
5249 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5250 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5251 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5252 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5253 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5254 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5255 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5256 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5257 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5258 search for each symbol reference.
5259
5260 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5261 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5262 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5263 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5264 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5265 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5266 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5267 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5268 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5269
5270 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5271 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5272 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5273 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5274 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5275 @smallexample
5276 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5277 @end smallexample
5278 @noindent
5279 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5280 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5281 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5282 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5283 takes precedence over a version script.
5284
5285 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5286 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5287 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5288 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5289 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5290
5291 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5292 source file. Here is an example:
5293
5294 @smallexample
5295 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5296 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5297 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5298 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5299 @end smallexample
5300
5301 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5302 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5303 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5304 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5305
5306 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5307 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5308 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5309 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5310 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5311 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5312
5313 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5314 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5315 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5316 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5317
5318 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5319
5320 @smallexample
5321 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5322 @end smallexample
5323
5324 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5325 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5326 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5327 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5328 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5329
5330 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5331 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5332 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5333 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5334 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5335 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5336 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5337 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5338 expect when you upgrade.
5339
5340 @node Expressions
5341 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5342 @cindex expressions
5343 @cindex arithmetic
5344 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5345 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5346 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5347 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5348
5349 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5350
5351 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5352 expressions.
5353
5354 @menu
5355 * Constants:: Constants
5356 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5357 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5358 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5359 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5360 * Operators:: Operators
5361 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5362 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5363 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5364 @end menu
5365
5366 @node Constants
5367 @subsection Constants
5368 @cindex integer notation
5369 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5370 All constants are integers.
5371
5372 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5373 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5374 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5375 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5376 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5377 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5378
5379 @cindex scaled integers
5380 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5381 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5382 @cindex suffixes for integers
5383 @cindex integer suffixes
5384 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5385 constant by
5386 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5387 @ifnottex
5388 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5389 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5390 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5391 @end ifnottex
5392 @tex
5393 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5394 @end tex
5395 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5396 respectively. For example, the following
5397 all refer to the same quantity:
5398
5399 @smallexample
5400 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5401 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5402 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5403 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5404 @end smallexample
5405
5406 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5407 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5408
5409 @node Symbolic Constants
5410 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5411 @cindex symbolic constants
5412 @kindex CONSTANT
5413 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5414 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5415
5416 @table @code
5417 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5418 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5419 The target's maximum page size.
5420
5421 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5422 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5423 The target's default page size.
5424 @end table
5425
5426 So for example:
5427
5428 @smallexample
5429 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5430 @end smallexample
5431
5432 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5433 supported by the target.
5434
5435 @node Symbols
5436 @subsection Symbol Names
5437 @cindex symbol names
5438 @cindex names
5439 @cindex quoted symbol names
5440 @kindex "
5441 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5442 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5443 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5444 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5445 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5446 @smallexample
5447 "SECTION" = 9;
5448 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5449 @end smallexample
5450
5451 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5452 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5453 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5454
5455 @node Orphan Sections
5456 @subsection Orphan Sections
5457 @cindex orphan
5458 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5459 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5460 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5461 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5462 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5463 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5464 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5465 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5466 at the end of the file.
5467
5468 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5469 well as section flag.
5470
5471 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5472 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5473 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5474 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5475 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5476 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5477 character.
5478
5479 @node Location Counter
5480 @subsection The Location Counter
5481 @kindex .
5482 @cindex dot
5483 @cindex location counter
5484 @cindex current output location
5485 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5486 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5487 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5488 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5489 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5490
5491 @cindex holes
5492 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5493 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5494 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5495 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5496 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5497
5498 @smallexample
5499 SECTIONS
5500 @{
5501 output :
5502 @{
5503 file1(.text)
5504 . = . + 1000;
5505 file2(.text)
5506 . += 1000;
5507 file3(.text)
5508 @} = 0x12345678;
5509 @}
5510 @end smallexample
5511 @noindent
5512 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5513 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5514 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5515 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5516 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5517 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5518
5519 @cindex dot inside sections
5520 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5521 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5522 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5523 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5524 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5525 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5526
5527 @smallexample
5528 SECTIONS
5529 @{
5530 . = 0x100
5531 .text: @{
5532 *(.text)
5533 . = 0x200
5534 @}
5535 . = 0x500
5536 .data: @{
5537 *(.data)
5538 . += 0x600
5539 @}
5540 @}
5541 @end smallexample
5542
5543 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5544 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5545 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5546 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5547 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5548 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5549 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5550 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5551
5552 @cindex dot outside sections
5553 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5554 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5555 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5556
5557 @smallexample
5558 SECTIONS
5559 @{
5560 start_of_text = . ;
5561 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5562 end_of_text = . ;
5563
5564 start_of_data = . ;
5565 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5566 end_of_data = . ;
5567 @}
5568 @end smallexample
5569
5570 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5571 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5572 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5573 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5574 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5575 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5576 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5577 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5578 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5579 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5580 as follows:
5581
5582 @smallexample
5583 SECTIONS
5584 @{
5585 start_of_text = . ;
5586 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5587 end_of_text = . ;
5588
5589 start_of_data = . ;
5590 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5591 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5592 end_of_data = . ;
5593 @}
5594 @end smallexample
5595
5596 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5597 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5598 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5599 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5600 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5601 section. So you could write:
5602
5603 @smallexample
5604 SECTIONS
5605 @{
5606 start_of_text = . ;
5607 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5608 end_of_text = . ;
5609
5610 . = . ;
5611 start_of_data = . ;
5612 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5613 end_of_data = . ;
5614 @}
5615 @end smallexample
5616
5617 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5618 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5619
5620 @need 2000
5621 @node Operators
5622 @subsection Operators
5623 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5624 @cindex arithmetic operators
5625 @cindex precedence in expressions
5626 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5627 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5628 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5629 @ifnottex
5630 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5631 @smallexample
5632 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5633 (highest)
5634 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5635 2 left * / %
5636 3 left + -
5637 4 left >> <<
5638 5 left == != > < <= >=
5639 6 left &
5640 7 left |
5641 8 left &&
5642 9 left ||
5643 10 right ? :
5644 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5645 (lowest)
5646 @end smallexample
5647 Notes:
5648 (1) Prefix operators
5649 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5650 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5651 @end ifnottex
5652 @tex
5653 \vskip \baselineskip
5654 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5655 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5656 \hrule
5657 \halign
5658 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5659 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5660 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5661 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5662 \noalign{\hrule}
5663 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5664 &highest&&&&&\cr
5665 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5666 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5667 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5668 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5669 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5670 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5671 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5672 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5673 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5674 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5675 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5676 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5677 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5678 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5679 \hrule}
5680 @end tex
5681 @iftex
5682 {
5683 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5684 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5685 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5686 }
5687 @end iftex
5688 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5689
5690 @node Evaluation
5691 @subsection Evaluation
5692 @cindex lazy evaluation
5693 @cindex expression evaluation order
5694 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5695 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5696
5697 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5698 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5699 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5700 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5701
5702 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5703 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5704 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5705 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5706
5707 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5708 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5709 allocation.
5710
5711 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5712 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5713
5714 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5715 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5716 following
5717 @smallexample
5718 @group
5719 SECTIONS
5720 @{
5721 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5722 @{ *(.text) @}
5723 @}
5724 @end group
5725 @end smallexample
5726 @noindent
5727 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5728 address}.
5729
5730 @node Expression Section
5731 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5732 @cindex expression sections
5733 @cindex absolute expressions
5734 @cindex relative expressions
5735 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5736 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5737 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5738 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5739 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5740 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5741 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5742 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5743 operations.
5744
5745 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5746 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5747 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5748 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5749 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5750 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5751 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5752 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5753 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5754 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5755 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5756 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5757 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5758 everywhere.
5759
5760 In the following simple example,
5761
5762 @smallexample
5763 @group
5764 SECTIONS
5765 @{
5766 . = 0x100;
5767 __executable_start = 0x100;
5768 .data :
5769 @{
5770 . = 0x10;
5771 __data_start = 0x10;
5772 *(.data)
5773 @}
5774 @dots{}
5775 @}
5776 @end group
5777 @end smallexample
5778
5779 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5780 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5781 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5782 section in the second two assignments.
5783
5784 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5785 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5786
5787 @itemize @bullet
5788 @item
5789 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5790 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5791 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5792 @item
5793 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5794 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5795 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5796 @item
5797 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5798 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5799 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5800 before applying the operator.
5801 @end itemize
5802
5803 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5804
5805 @itemize @bullet
5806 @item
5807 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5808 @item
5809 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5810 @item
5811 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5812 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5813 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5814 @item
5815 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5816 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5817 section as the relative operand(s).
5818 @item
5819 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5820 conversions) is an absolute address.
5821 @end itemize
5822
5823 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5824 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5825 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5826 section @samp{.data}:
5827 @smallexample
5828 SECTIONS
5829 @{
5830 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5831 @}
5832 @end smallexample
5833 @noindent
5834 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5835 @samp{.data} section.
5836
5837 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5838 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5839
5840 @node Builtin Functions
5841 @subsection Builtin Functions
5842 @cindex functions in expressions
5843 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5844 use in linker script expressions.
5845
5846 @table @code
5847 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5848 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5849 @cindex expression, absolute
5850 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5851 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5852 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5853 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5854
5855 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5856 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5857 @cindex section address in expression
5858 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5859 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5860 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5861 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5862 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5863 the other two will be absolute:
5864 @smallexample
5865 @group
5866 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5867 .output1 :
5868 @{
5869 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5870 @dots{}
5871 @}
5872 .output :
5873 @{
5874 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5875 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5876 @}
5877 @dots{} @}
5878 @end group
5879 @end smallexample
5880
5881 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5882 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5883 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5884 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5885 @cindex round up location counter
5886 @cindex align location counter
5887 @cindex round up expression
5888 @cindex align expression
5889 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5890 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5891 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5892 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5893 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5894 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5895
5896 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5897 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5898 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5899 input sections:
5900 @smallexample
5901 @group
5902 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5903 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5904 *(.data)
5905 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5906 @}
5907 @dots{} @}
5908 @end group
5909 @end smallexample
5910 @noindent
5911 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5912 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5913 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5914 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5915
5916 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5917
5918 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5919 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5920 @cindex section alignment
5921 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5922 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5923 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5924 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5925 value in that section.
5926 @smallexample
5927 @group
5928 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5929 .output @{
5930 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5931 @dots{}
5932 @}
5933 @dots{} @}
5934 @end group
5935 @end smallexample
5936
5937 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5938 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5939 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5940 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5941 section.
5942
5943 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5944 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5945 This is equivalent to either
5946 @smallexample
5947 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5948 @end smallexample
5949 or
5950 @smallexample
5951 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5952 @end smallexample
5953 @noindent
5954 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5955 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5956 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5957 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5958 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5959 bytes in the on-disk file.
5960
5961 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5962 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5963 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5964 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5965 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5966
5967 @noindent
5968 Example:
5969 @smallexample
5970 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5971 @end smallexample
5972
5973 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5974 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5975 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5976 evaluation purposes.
5977
5978 @smallexample
5979 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5980 @end smallexample
5981
5982 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5983 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5984 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5985 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
5986 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5987 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5988 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5989 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5990 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5991 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5992 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5993 section alignment.
5994
5995 @smallexample
5996 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5997 @end smallexample
5998
5999 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6000 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6001 @cindex symbol defaults
6002 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6003 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6004 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6005 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6006 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6007 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6008 existed, its value is preserved:
6009
6010 @smallexample
6011 @group
6012 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6013 .text : @{
6014 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6015 @dots{}
6016 @}
6017 @dots{}
6018 @}
6019 @end group
6020 @end smallexample
6021
6022 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6023 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6024 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6025
6026 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6027 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6028 @cindex section load address in expression
6029 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6030 Section LMA}).
6031
6032 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6033 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6034 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6035 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6036
6037 @kindex MAX
6038 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6039 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6040
6041 @kindex MIN
6042 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6043 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6044
6045 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6046 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6047 @cindex unallocated address, next
6048 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6049 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6050 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6051 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6052
6053 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6054 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6055 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6056
6057 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6058 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6059 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6060 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6061 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6062 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6063 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6064 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6065 name.
6066
6067 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6068 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6069 @cindex section size
6070 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6071 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6072 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6073 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6074 @smallexample
6075 @group
6076 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6077 .output @{
6078 .start = . ;
6079 @dots{}
6080 .end = . ;
6081 @}
6082 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6083 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6084 @dots{} @}
6085 @end group
6086 @end smallexample
6087
6088 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6089 @itemx sizeof_headers
6090 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6091 @cindex header size
6092 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6093 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6094 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6095 choose, to facilitate paging.
6096
6097 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6098 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6099 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6100 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6101 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6102 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6103 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6104 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6105 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6106 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6107 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6108 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6109 @end table
6110
6111 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6112 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6113 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6114 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6115 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6116 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6117 linker will report an error.
6118
6119 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6120
6121 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6122 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6123 commands.
6124
6125 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6126 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6127 read. This can affect archive searching.
6128
6129 @ifset GENERIC
6130 @node Machine Dependent
6131 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6132
6133 @cindex machine dependencies
6134 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6135 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6136 functionality are not listed.
6137
6138 @menu
6139 @ifset H8300
6140 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6141 @end ifset
6142 @ifset I960
6143 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6144 @end ifset
6145 @ifset M68HC11
6146 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6147 @end ifset
6148 @ifset ARM
6149 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6150 @end ifset
6151 @ifset HPPA
6152 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6153 @end ifset
6154 @ifset M68K
6155 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6156 @end ifset
6157 @ifset MIPS
6158 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6159 @end ifset
6160 @ifset MMIX
6161 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6162 @end ifset
6163 @ifset MSP430
6164 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6165 @end ifset
6166 @ifset NDS32
6167 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6168 @end ifset
6169 @ifset NIOSII
6170 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6171 @end ifset
6172 @ifset POWERPC
6173 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6174 @end ifset
6175 @ifset POWERPC64
6176 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6177 @end ifset
6178 @ifset SPU
6179 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6180 @end ifset
6181 @ifset TICOFF
6182 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6183 @end ifset
6184 @ifset WIN32
6185 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6186 @end ifset
6187 @ifset XTENSA
6188 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6189 @end ifset
6190 @end menu
6191 @end ifset
6192
6193 @ifset H8300
6194 @ifclear GENERIC
6195 @raisesections
6196 @end ifclear
6197
6198 @node H8/300
6199 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6200
6201 @cindex H8/300 support
6202 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6203 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6204
6205 @table @emph
6206 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6207 @item relaxing address modes
6208 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6209 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6210 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6211 respectively.
6212
6213 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6214 @item synthesizing instructions
6215 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6216 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6217 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6218 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6219 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6220 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6221 top page of memory).
6222
6223 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6224 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6225 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6226 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6227 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6228 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6229 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6230
6231 @item bit manipulation instructions
6232 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6233 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6234 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6235 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6236 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6237 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6238 the top page of memory).
6239
6240 @item system control instructions
6241 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6242 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6243 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6244 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6245 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6246 the top page of memory).
6247 @end table
6248
6249 @ifclear GENERIC
6250 @lowersections
6251 @end ifclear
6252 @end ifset
6253
6254 @ifclear GENERIC
6255 @ifset Renesas
6256 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6257 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6258 @node Renesas
6259 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6260
6261 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6262 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6263 options are required for these chips.
6264 @end ifset
6265 @end ifclear
6266
6267 @ifset I960
6268 @ifclear GENERIC
6269 @raisesections
6270 @end ifclear
6271
6272 @node i960
6273 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6274
6275 @cindex i960 support
6276
6277 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6278 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6279 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6280 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6281 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6282 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6283 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6284
6285 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6286 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6287 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6288 the names
6289
6290 @smallexample
6291 @group
6292 try
6293 libtry.a
6294 tryca
6295 libtryca.a
6296 @end group
6297 @end smallexample
6298
6299 @noindent
6300 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6301 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6302
6303 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6304 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6305 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6306 specifies a library.
6307
6308 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6309 @cindex relaxing on i960
6310 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6311 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6312 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6313 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6314 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6315 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6316 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6317 not itself call any subroutines).
6318
6319 @ifclear GENERIC
6320 @lowersections
6321 @end ifclear
6322 @end ifset
6323
6324 @ifset ARM
6325 @ifclear GENERIC
6326 @raisesections
6327 @end ifclear
6328
6329 @ifset M68HC11
6330 @ifclear GENERIC
6331 @raisesections
6332 @end ifclear
6333
6334 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6335 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6336
6337 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6338
6339 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6340
6341 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6342 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6343
6344 @table @emph
6345 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6346 @item relaxing address modes
6347 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6348 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6349 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6350 respectively.
6351
6352 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6353 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6354 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6355
6356 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6357 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6358 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6359 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6360 @code{bset} instructions.
6361
6362 @end table
6363
6364 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6365
6366 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6367 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6368 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6369 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6370 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6371 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6372 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6373 point to the function trampoline.
6374
6375 @ifclear GENERIC
6376 @lowersections
6377 @end ifclear
6378 @end ifset
6379
6380 @node ARM
6381 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6382
6383 @cindex ARM interworking support
6384 @kindex --support-old-code
6385 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6386 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6387 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6388 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6389 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6390 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6391 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6392 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6393 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6394 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6395
6396 @cindex thumb entry point
6397 @cindex entry point, thumb
6398 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6399 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6400 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6401 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6402 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6403 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6404
6405 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6406 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6407 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6408 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6409 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6410 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6411
6412 @cindex BE8
6413 @kindex --be8
6414 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6415 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6416 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6417
6418 @cindex TARGET1
6419 @kindex --target1-rel
6420 @kindex --target1-abs
6421 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6422 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6423 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6424 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6425
6426 @cindex TARGET2
6427 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6428 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6429 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6430 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6431 @table @samp
6432 @item rel
6433 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6434 @item abs
6435 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6436 @item got-rel
6437 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6438 @end table
6439
6440 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6441 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6442 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6443 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6444 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6445 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6446
6447 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6448 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6449 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6450
6451 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6452 relocations are ignored.
6453
6454 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6455 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6456 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6457 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6458
6459 @smallexample
6460 TST rM, #1
6461 MOVEQ PC, rM
6462 BX Rn
6463 @end smallexample
6464
6465 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6466 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6467 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6468
6469 @cindex USE_BLX
6470 @kindex --use-blx
6471 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6472 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6473 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6474 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6475 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6476
6477 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6478 specify it if you are using that target.
6479
6480 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6481 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6482 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6483 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6484 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6485 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6486 the support code can read the intended values.
6487
6488 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6489 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6490 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6491 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6492 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6493 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6494
6495 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6496 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6497 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6498 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6499 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6500 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6501
6502 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6503 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6504 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6505 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6506 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6507 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6508 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6509
6510 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6511 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6512 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6513 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6514 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6515 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6516 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6517
6518 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6519 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6520 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6521
6522 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6523 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6524 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6525 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6526 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6527 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6528 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6529 not be diagnosed.
6530
6531 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6532 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6533 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6534 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6535 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6536 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6537 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6538
6539 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6540 @kindex --pic-veneer
6541 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6542 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6543 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6544 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6545
6546 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6547 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6548 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6549 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6550 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6551 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6552 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6553 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6554 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6555 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6556 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6557 where they should be placed.
6558
6559 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6560 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6561 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6562 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6563 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6564 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6565 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6566 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6567 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6568 from the input sections.
6569
6570 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6571 @samp{N = +1}.
6572
6573 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6574 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6575 otherwise.
6576
6577 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6578 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6579 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6580 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6581
6582 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6583
6584 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6585 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6586 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6587 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6588
6589 Please contact ARM for further details.
6590
6591 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6592 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6593 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6594 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6595
6596 @kindex --long-plt
6597 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6598 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6599 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6600 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6601
6602 @ifclear GENERIC
6603 @lowersections
6604 @end ifclear
6605 @end ifset
6606
6607 @ifset HPPA
6608 @ifclear GENERIC
6609 @raisesections
6610 @end ifclear
6611
6612 @node HPPA ELF32
6613 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6614 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6615 @kindex --multi-subspace
6616 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6617 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6618 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6619 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6620 multiple sub-spaces.
6621
6622 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6623 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6624 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6625 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6626 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6627 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6628 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6629 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6630 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6631 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6632 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6633 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6634 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6635 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6636 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6637 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6638
6639 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6640 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6641 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6642 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6643
6644 @ifclear GENERIC
6645 @lowersections
6646 @end ifclear
6647 @end ifset
6648
6649 @ifset M68K
6650 @ifclear GENERIC
6651 @raisesections
6652 @end ifclear
6653
6654 @node M68K
6655 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6656
6657 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6658 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6659 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6660 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6661 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6662 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6663 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6664 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6665 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6666 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6667 support such GOTs.
6668 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6669 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6670 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6671 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6672
6673 @ifclear GENERIC
6674 @lowersections
6675 @end ifclear
6676 @end ifset
6677
6678 @ifset MIPS
6679 @ifclear GENERIC
6680 @raisesections
6681 @end ifclear
6682
6683 @node MIPS
6684 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6685
6686 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6687 @kindex --insn32
6688 @kindex --no-insn32
6689 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6690 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6691 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6692 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6693 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6694 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6695
6696 @ifclear GENERIC
6697 @lowersections
6698 @end ifclear
6699 @end ifset
6700
6701 @ifset MMIX
6702 @ifclear GENERIC
6703 @raisesections
6704 @end ifclear
6705
6706 @node MMIX
6707 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6708 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6709 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6710 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6711 can translate between the two formats.
6712
6713 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6714 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6715 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6716 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6717 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6718 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6719 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6720 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6721
6722 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6723 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6724 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6725 of a section.
6726
6727 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6728 are left out from an mmo file.
6729
6730 @ifclear GENERIC
6731 @lowersections
6732 @end ifclear
6733 @end ifset
6734
6735 @ifset MSP430
6736 @ifclear GENERIC
6737 @raisesections
6738 @end ifclear
6739
6740 @node MSP430
6741 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6742 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6743 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6744 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6745
6746 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6747 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6748
6749 @table @code
6750 @item @samp{.vectors}
6751 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6752
6753 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6754 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6755 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6756
6757 @item @samp{.infomem}
6758 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6759 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6760
6761 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6762 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6763 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6764
6765 @item @samp{.noinit}
6766 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6767
6768 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6769 @end table
6770
6771 @ifclear GENERIC
6772 @lowersections
6773 @end ifclear
6774 @end ifset
6775
6776 @ifset NDS32
6777 @ifclear GENERIC
6778 @raisesections
6779 @end ifclear
6780
6781 @node NDS32
6782 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6783 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6784 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6785 relaxes objects according to these options.
6786
6787 @table @code
6788 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6789 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6790
6791 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6792 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6793
6794 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6795 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6796
6797 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6798 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6799
6800 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6801 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6802
6803 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6804 Update the existing EX9 table.
6805
6806 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6807 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6808
6809 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6810 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6811
6812 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6813 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6814
6815 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6816 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6817 @end table
6818
6819 @ifclear GENERIC
6820 @lowersections
6821 @end ifclear
6822 @end ifset
6823
6824 @ifset NIOSII
6825 @ifclear GENERIC
6826 @raisesections
6827 @end ifclear
6828
6829 @node Nios II
6830 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6831 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6832 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6833
6834 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6835 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6836 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6837 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6838 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6839 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6840 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6841 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6842 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6843 larger than 256MB.
6844
6845 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6846 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6847 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6848 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6849 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6850 register as a temporary.
6851
6852 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6853 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6854 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6855
6856 @ifclear GENERIC
6857 @lowersections
6858 @end ifclear
6859 @end ifset
6860
6861 @ifset POWERPC
6862 @ifclear GENERIC
6863 @raisesections
6864 @end ifclear
6865
6866 @node PowerPC ELF32
6867 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6868 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6869 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6870 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6871 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6872 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6873 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6874 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6875 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6876 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6877 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6878 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6879 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6880
6881 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6882 @table @option
6883 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6884 @kindex --bss-plt
6885 @item --bss-plt
6886 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6887 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6888 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6889 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6890 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6891 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6892 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6893 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6894
6895 @kindex --secure-plt
6896 @item --secure-plt
6897 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6898 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6899 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6900 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6901 style BSS PLT.
6902
6903 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6904 @kindex --sdata-got
6905 @item --sdata-got
6906 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6907 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6908 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6909 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6910 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6911 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6912 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6913 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6914 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6915 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6916 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6917 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6918
6919 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6920 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6921 @item --emit-stub-syms
6922 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6923 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6924
6925 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6926 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6927 @item --no-tls-optimize
6928 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6929 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6930 disable the optimization.
6931 @end table
6932
6933 @ifclear GENERIC
6934 @lowersections
6935 @end ifclear
6936 @end ifset
6937
6938 @ifset POWERPC64
6939 @ifclear GENERIC
6940 @raisesections
6941 @end ifclear
6942
6943 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6944 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6945
6946 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6947 @table @option
6948 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6949 @kindex --stub-group-size
6950 @item --stub-group-size
6951 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6952 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6953 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6954 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6955 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6956 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6957 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6958 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6959 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6960 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6961 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6962 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6963 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6964 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6965
6966 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6967 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6968 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6969 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6970
6971 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6972 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6973 @item --emit-stub-syms
6974 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6975 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6976
6977 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6978 @kindex --dotsyms
6979 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6980 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6981 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6982 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6983 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6984 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6985 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6986 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6987 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6988 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6989 feature.
6990
6991 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6992 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6993 @item --no-tls-optimize
6994 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6995 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6996 disable the optimization.
6997
6998 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6999 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7000 @item --no-opd-optimize
7001 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7002 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7003 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7004 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7005
7006 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7007 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7008 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7009 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7010 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7011 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7012 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7013
7014 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7015 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7016 @item --no-toc-optimize
7017 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7018 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7019 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7020 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7021 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7022 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7023 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7024 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7025 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7026 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7027 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7028 optimization.
7029
7030 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7031 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7032 @item --no-multi-toc
7033 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7034 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7035 where TOC
7036 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7037 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7038 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7039 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7040 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7041 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7042 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7043 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7044
7045 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7046 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7047 @item --no-toc-sort
7048 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7049 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7050 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7051 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7052 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7053 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7054 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7055 off this feature.
7056
7057 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7058 @kindex --plt-align
7059 @kindex --no-plt-align
7060 @item --plt-align
7061 @itemx --no-plt-align
7062 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7063 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7064 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7065 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7066 stubs are packed tightly.
7067
7068 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7069 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7070 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7071 @item --plt-static-chain
7072 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7073 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7074 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7075 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7076
7077 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7078 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7079 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7080 @item --plt-thread-safe
7081 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7082 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7083 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7084 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7085 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7086 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7087 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7088 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7089 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7090 default behaviour.
7091 @end table
7092
7093 @ifclear GENERIC
7094 @lowersections
7095 @end ifclear
7096 @end ifset
7097
7098 @ifset SPU
7099 @ifclear GENERIC
7100 @raisesections
7101 @end ifclear
7102
7103 @node SPU ELF
7104 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7105
7106 @cindex SPU ELF options
7107 @table @option
7108
7109 @cindex SPU plugins
7110 @kindex --plugin
7111 @item --plugin
7112 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7113
7114 @cindex SPU overlays
7115 @kindex --no-overlays
7116 @item --no-overlays
7117 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7118 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7119 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7120 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7121
7122 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7123 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7124 @item --emit-stub-syms
7125 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7126 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7127
7128 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7129 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7130 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7131 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7132 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7133 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7134
7135 @cindex SPU local store size
7136 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7137 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7138 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7139 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7140 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7141
7142 @cindex SPU
7143 @kindex --stack-analysis
7144 @item --stack-analysis
7145 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7146 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7147 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7148 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7149 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7150 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7151 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7152 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7153 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7154 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7155 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7156 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7157 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7158 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7159 and calls will be given.
7160
7161 @cindex SPU
7162 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7163 @item --emit-stack-syms
7164 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7165 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7166 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7167 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7168 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7169 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7170 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7171 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7172 @end table
7173
7174 @ifclear GENERIC
7175 @lowersections
7176 @end ifclear
7177 @end ifset
7178
7179 @ifset TICOFF
7180 @ifclear GENERIC
7181 @raisesections
7182 @end ifclear
7183
7184 @node TI COFF
7185 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7186 @cindex TI COFF versions
7187 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7188 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7189 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7190 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7191 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7192 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7193
7194 @ifclear GENERIC
7195 @lowersections
7196 @end ifclear
7197 @end ifset
7198
7199 @ifset WIN32
7200 @ifclear GENERIC
7201 @raisesections
7202 @end ifclear
7203
7204 @node WIN32
7205 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7206
7207 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7208 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7209 command line options mentioned here.
7210
7211 @table @emph
7212 @cindex import libraries
7213 @item import libraries
7214 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7215 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7216 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7217 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7218 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7219 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7220
7221 @item exporting DLL symbols
7222 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7223 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7224
7225 @table @emph
7226 @item using auto-export functionality
7227 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7228 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7229 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7230
7231 @itemize
7232 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7233 @item --exclude-symbols
7234 @item --exclude-libs
7235 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7236 @item --version-script
7237 @end itemize
7238
7239 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7240 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7241 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7242 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7243 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7244 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7245 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7246 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7247
7248 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7249 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7250 if either of the following are true:
7251
7252 @itemize
7253 @item A DEF file is used.
7254 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7255 @end itemize
7256
7257 @item using a DEF file
7258 @cindex using a DEF file
7259 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7260 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7261 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7262 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7263 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7264
7265 @example
7266 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7267 @end example
7268
7269 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7270 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7271
7272 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7273
7274 @example
7275 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7276
7277 EXPORTS
7278 foo
7279 bar
7280 _bar = bar
7281 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7282 var1 DATA
7283 doo = foo == foo2
7284 eoo DATA == var1
7285 @end example
7286
7287 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7288 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7289 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7290 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7291 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7292 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7293 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7294 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7295 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7296
7297 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7298 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7299 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7300
7301 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7302 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7303 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7304 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7305
7306 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7307 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7308 non-default base address for the image.
7309
7310 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7311 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7312 filename specified on the command line.
7313
7314 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7315
7316 @example
7317 EXPORTS
7318 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7319 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7320 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7321 @end example
7322
7323 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7324 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7325 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7326 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7327 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7328 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7329 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7330
7331 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7332
7333 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7334 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7335 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7336 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7337 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7338
7339 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7340 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7341 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7342 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7343
7344 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7345 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7346 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7347 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7348 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7349 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7350 application will behave unexpectedly.
7351
7352 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7353 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7354 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7355 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7356 the DLL without an import library.
7357
7358 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7359 other DEF file statements
7360
7361 @cindex creating a DEF file
7362 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7363 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7364
7365 @item Using decorations
7366 @cindex Using decorations
7367 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7368 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7369 declared as:
7370
7371 @example
7372 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7373 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7374 @end example
7375
7376 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7377 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7378 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7379 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7380
7381 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7382 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7383 instead:
7384
7385 @example
7386 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7387 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7388 @end example
7389
7390 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7391 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7392 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7393 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7394 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7395 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7396 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7397 information.
7398 @end table
7399
7400 @cindex automatic data imports
7401 @item automatic data imports
7402 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7403 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7404 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7405 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7406 code to these platforms, especially for large
7407 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7408 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7409 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7410 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7411 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7412 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7413 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7414 trigger the feature's use.
7415
7416 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7417 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7418
7419 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7420 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7421
7422 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7423 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7424 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7425 below.
7426
7427 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7428 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7429 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7430 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7431 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7432 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7433 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7434 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7435 references.
7436
7437 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7438 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7439 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7440 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7441 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7442 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7443 run without error on an older system.
7444
7445 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7446 enabled as needed.
7447
7448 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7449 @item direct linking to a dll
7450 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7451 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7452 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7453 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7454 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7455 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7456 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7457 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7458 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7459 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7460
7461 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7462 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7463 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7464 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7465 select the dll instead of an import library.
7466
7467
7468 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7469 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7470
7471 @example
7472 libxxx.dll.a
7473 xxx.dll.a
7474 libxxx.a
7475 xxx.lib
7476 cygxxx.dll (*)
7477 libxxx.dll
7478 xxx.dll
7479 @end example
7480
7481 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7482
7483 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7484 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7485 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7486 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7487 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7488
7489 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7490 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7491 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7492 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7493 could coexist on the same machine.
7494
7495 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7496 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7497 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7498
7499 @example
7500 bin/
7501 cygxxx.dll
7502 lib/
7503 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7504 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7505 @end example
7506
7507 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7508 done two ways:
7509
7510 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7511 @example
7512 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7513 @end example
7514
7515 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7516 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7517 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7518 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7519
7520 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7521 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7522 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7523 making the app/dll.
7524
7525 @example
7526 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7527 @end example
7528
7529 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7530
7531 @example
7532 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7533 @end example
7534
7535 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7536 perfectly legal
7537
7538 @example
7539 bin/
7540 cygxxx-5.dll
7541 lib/
7542 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7543 @end example
7544
7545 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7546 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7547 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7548
7549 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7550 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7551
7552 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7553 work with auto-imported data.
7554
7555 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7556 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7557 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7558 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7559 possible to do this without an import lib.
7560
7561 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7562 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7563 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7564 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7565
7566 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7567 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7568 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7569 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7570 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7571 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7572 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7573
7574 @item symbol aliasing
7575 @table @emph
7576 @item adding additional names
7577 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7578 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7579 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7580 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7581 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7582
7583 @example
7584 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7585
7586 EXPORTS
7587 foo
7588 _foo = foo
7589 @end example
7590
7591 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7592
7593 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7594 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7595
7596 @example
7597 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7598 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7599 @end example
7600
7601 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7602 symbols.
7603
7604 @item renaming symbols
7605 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7606 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7607 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7608 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7609 created). In the following example:
7610
7611 @example
7612 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7613
7614 EXPORTS
7615 _foo = foo
7616 @end example
7617
7618 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7619 @samp{_foo}.
7620 @end table
7621
7622 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7623 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7624 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7625 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7626 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7627 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7628 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7629 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7630 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7631 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7632 which is probably not what you wanted.
7633
7634 @cindex weak externals
7635 @item weak externals
7636 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7637 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7638 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7639 are three variants of weak externals:
7640 @itemize
7641 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7642 called lazy externals.
7643 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7644 This form is not presently implemented.
7645 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7646 implemented.
7647 @end itemize
7648 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7649 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7650 uses a default value.
7651
7652 @cindex aligned common symbols
7653 @item aligned common symbols
7654 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7655 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7656 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7657 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7658 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7659 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7660 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7661 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7662
7663 @end table
7664
7665 @ifclear GENERIC
7666 @lowersections
7667 @end ifclear
7668 @end ifset
7669
7670 @ifset XTENSA
7671 @ifclear GENERIC
7672 @raisesections
7673 @end ifclear
7674
7675 @node Xtensa
7676 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7677
7678 @cindex Xtensa processors
7679 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7680 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7681 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7682 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7683 example, with the command:
7684
7685 @smallexample
7686 SECTIONS
7687 @{
7688 .text : @{
7689 *(.literal .text)
7690 @}
7691 @}
7692 @end smallexample
7693
7694 @noindent
7695 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7696 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7697 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7698 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7699 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7700 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7701 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7702
7703 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7704 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7705 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7706 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7707 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7708 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7709 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7710 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7711 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7712 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7713 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7714 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7715
7716 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7717 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7718 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7719 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7720 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7721 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7722 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7723 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7724 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7725 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7726 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7727 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7728 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7729 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7730
7731 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7732 control the linker:
7733
7734 @cindex Xtensa options
7735 @table @option
7736 @item --size-opt
7737 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7738 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7739 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7740 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7741 preserve the correctness of the code.
7742 @end table
7743
7744 @ifclear GENERIC
7745 @lowersections
7746 @end ifclear
7747 @end ifset
7748
7749 @ifclear SingleFormat
7750 @node BFD
7751 @chapter BFD
7752
7753 @cindex back end
7754 @cindex object file management
7755 @cindex object formats available
7756 @kindex objdump -i
7757 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7758 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7759 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7760 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7761 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7762 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7763 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7764 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7765 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7766
7767 @cindex BFD requirements
7768 @cindex requirements for BFD
7769 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7770 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7771 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7772 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7773 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7774 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7775 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7776
7777 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7778 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7779 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7780 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7781
7782 @menu
7783 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7784 @end menu
7785
7786 @node BFD outline
7787 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7788 @cindex opening object files
7789 @include bfdsumm.texi
7790 @end ifclear
7791
7792 @node Reporting Bugs
7793 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7794 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7795 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7796
7797 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7798
7799 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7800 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7801 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7802 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7803 @command{ld}.
7804
7805 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7806 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7807
7808 @menu
7809 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7810 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7811 @end menu
7812
7813 @node Bug Criteria
7814 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7815 @cindex bug criteria
7816
7817 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7818
7819 @itemize @bullet
7820 @cindex fatal signal
7821 @cindex linker crash
7822 @cindex crash of linker
7823 @item
7824 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7825 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7826
7827 @cindex error on valid input
7828 @item
7829 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7830
7831 @cindex invalid input
7832 @item
7833 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7834 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7835 object files are correct.
7836
7837 @item
7838 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7839 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7840 @end itemize
7841
7842 @node Bug Reporting
7843 @section How to Report Bugs
7844 @cindex bug reports
7845 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7846
7847 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7848 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7849 recommend you contact that organization first.
7850
7851 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7852 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7853 distribution.
7854
7855 @ifset BUGURL
7856 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7857 @value{BUGURL}.
7858 @end ifset
7859
7860 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7861 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7862 fact or leave it out, state it!
7863
7864 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7865 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7866 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7867 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7868 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7869 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7870 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7871 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7872 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7873 and the most helpful.
7874
7875 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7876 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7877 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7878
7879 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7880 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7881 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7882 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7883
7884 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7885
7886 @itemize @bullet
7887 @item
7888 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7889 the @samp{--version} argument.
7890
7891 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7892 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7893
7894 @item
7895 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7896 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7897
7898 @item
7899 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7900 version number.
7901
7902 @item
7903 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7904 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7905
7906 @item
7907 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7908 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7909 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7910 sufficient.
7911
7912 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7913 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7914
7915 @item
7916 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7917 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7918 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7919 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7920 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7921 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7922 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7923 attachments are best.
7924
7925 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7926 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7927 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7928 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7929 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7930
7931 @item
7932 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7933 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7934
7935 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7936 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7937 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7938 a chance to make a mistake.
7939
7940 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7941 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7942 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7943 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7944 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7945 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7946 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7947 any conclusion from our observations.
7948
7949 @item
7950 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7951 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7952 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7953 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7954 context, not by line number.
7955
7956 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7957 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7958 @end itemize
7959
7960 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7961
7962 @itemize @bullet
7963 @item
7964 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7965
7966 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7967 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7968 changes will not affect it.
7969
7970 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7971 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7972 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7973 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7974
7975 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7976 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7977 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7978 less time, and so on.
7979
7980 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7981 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7982
7983 @item
7984 A patch for the bug.
7985
7986 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7987 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7988 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7989 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7990
7991 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7992 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7993 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7994 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7995 fixed.
7996
7997 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7998 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7999 help us to understand.
8000
8001 @item
8002 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8003
8004 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8005 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8006 @end itemize
8007
8008 @node MRI
8009 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8010 @cindex MRI compatibility
8011 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8012 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8013 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8014 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8015 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8016 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8017 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8018
8019 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8020 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8021 features to make use of them.
8022
8023 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8024 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8025
8026 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8027 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8028 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8029 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8030 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8031
8032 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8033
8034 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8035 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8036 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8037
8038 @table @code
8039 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8040 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8041 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8042 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8043 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8044 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8045 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8046 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8047 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8048 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8049 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8050
8051 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8052 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8053 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8054 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8055
8056 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8057
8058 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8059 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8060 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8061 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8062
8063 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8064 @item BASE @var{expression}
8065 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8066 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8067
8068 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8069 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8070 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8071 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8072
8073 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8074 @item END
8075 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8076
8077 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8078 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8079 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8080 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8081
8082 @enumerate
8083 @item
8084 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8085
8086 @item
8087 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8088
8089 @item
8090 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8091 @samp{COFF}
8092 @end enumerate
8093
8094 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8095 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8096 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8097 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8098
8099 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8100 same line, with no change in its effect.
8101
8102 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8103 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8104 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8105 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8106 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8107 command line.
8108
8109 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8110 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8111 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8112 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8113 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8114
8115 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8116 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8117 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8118 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8119 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8120 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8121 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8122 file, in the order specified.
8123
8124 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8125 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8126 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8127 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8128 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8129 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8130
8131 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8132 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8133 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8134 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8135 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8136 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8137 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8138 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8139 @end table
8140
8141 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8142 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8143 @include fdl.texi
8144
8145 @node LD Index
8146 @unnumbered LD Index
8147
8148 @printindex cp
8149
8150 @tex
8151 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8152 % meantime:
8153 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8154 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8155 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8156 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8157 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8158 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8159 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8160 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8161 \page\colophon
8162 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8163 @end tex
8164
8165 @bye
This page took 0.21591 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.